psychexchange.co.uk shared resource
Post on 16-Jul-2015
776 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
Exam
Learning Objectives
By the end of this section you should be able to
describe and evaluate the physiological approach in psychology
describe and evaluate various methodologies used by the physiological approach
consider pertinent issues perspectives and debates context and theory strengths and
limitations and the implications of core studies of the physiological approach
MAGUIRE E A GADIAN D G JOHNSRUDE I S GOOD C D ASHBURNER J FRACKOWIAK RS amp FRITH C D (2000) Navigation-related structural changes in the hippocampi of taxi drivers Proceedings of the National Academy of Science USA 97 4398ndash4403
DEMENT W amp KLEITMAN N (1957) The relation of eye movements during sleep to dream activity Journal of Experimental Psychology 53 (5) 339ndash346
SPERRY R (1968) Hemisphere deconnection and unity in consciousness American Psychologist 23
723ndash733
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 2
Physiological Glossary
Dement and Kleitman
EEGhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
EOGhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
REMhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Non-REMhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Fixed arrayhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Maguire
Hippocampushelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
MRI scanhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Pixel countinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
VBMhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Neural Plasticityhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Spatial Memoryhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Grey Matterhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Sperry
Corpus Callosumhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Commisurotomy
Right Visual Fieldhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Left Visual Fieldhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Tactile Stimulihelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Lateralisationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 3
Physiological Approach
Assumptions of the Physiological Approach
Strengths and Weaknesses of the Physiological Approach
Strengths Weaknesses
Implications
Implications
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 4
The relation of eye movements during sleep to dream activity An objective method for the
study of dreaming
There are 5 stages of sleep draw the EEG recording and describe each stage
In pairs take turns
to summarise a
dream you have
had
Can you think what makes you have this
dream
Why do you think you dream
Do unusual
things happen in
your dreams
1
2
3
4
5
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 5
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Draw a line to correct part of diagram to show where electrodes were attached in order for
experimenters to monitor eye movement and brain activity
From the study by Dement amp Kleitman what does an electroencephalogram (EEG) record (2)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Outline one problem with using an EEG to investigate dreaming (2)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Electro-encephalogram (EEG)
Electro-oculogram(EOG)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 6
Procedure for Hypothesis 1
Procedure for Hypothesis 2
Procedure for Hypothesis 3
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 2
Physiological Glossary
Dement and Kleitman
EEGhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
EOGhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
REMhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Non-REMhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Fixed arrayhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Maguire
Hippocampushelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
MRI scanhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Pixel countinghelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
VBMhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Neural Plasticityhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Spatial Memoryhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Grey Matterhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Sperry
Corpus Callosumhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Commisurotomy
Right Visual Fieldhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Left Visual Fieldhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Tactile Stimulihelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
Lateralisationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 3
Physiological Approach
Assumptions of the Physiological Approach
Strengths and Weaknesses of the Physiological Approach
Strengths Weaknesses
Implications
Implications
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 4
The relation of eye movements during sleep to dream activity An objective method for the
study of dreaming
There are 5 stages of sleep draw the EEG recording and describe each stage
In pairs take turns
to summarise a
dream you have
had
Can you think what makes you have this
dream
Why do you think you dream
Do unusual
things happen in
your dreams
1
2
3
4
5
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 5
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Draw a line to correct part of diagram to show where electrodes were attached in order for
experimenters to monitor eye movement and brain activity
From the study by Dement amp Kleitman what does an electroencephalogram (EEG) record (2)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Outline one problem with using an EEG to investigate dreaming (2)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Electro-encephalogram (EEG)
Electro-oculogram(EOG)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 6
Procedure for Hypothesis 1
Procedure for Hypothesis 2
Procedure for Hypothesis 3
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 3
Physiological Approach
Assumptions of the Physiological Approach
Strengths and Weaknesses of the Physiological Approach
Strengths Weaknesses
Implications
Implications
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 4
The relation of eye movements during sleep to dream activity An objective method for the
study of dreaming
There are 5 stages of sleep draw the EEG recording and describe each stage
In pairs take turns
to summarise a
dream you have
had
Can you think what makes you have this
dream
Why do you think you dream
Do unusual
things happen in
your dreams
1
2
3
4
5
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 5
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Draw a line to correct part of diagram to show where electrodes were attached in order for
experimenters to monitor eye movement and brain activity
From the study by Dement amp Kleitman what does an electroencephalogram (EEG) record (2)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Outline one problem with using an EEG to investigate dreaming (2)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Electro-encephalogram (EEG)
Electro-oculogram(EOG)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 6
Procedure for Hypothesis 1
Procedure for Hypothesis 2
Procedure for Hypothesis 3
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 4
The relation of eye movements during sleep to dream activity An objective method for the
study of dreaming
There are 5 stages of sleep draw the EEG recording and describe each stage
In pairs take turns
to summarise a
dream you have
had
Can you think what makes you have this
dream
Why do you think you dream
Do unusual
things happen in
your dreams
1
2
3
4
5
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 5
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Draw a line to correct part of diagram to show where electrodes were attached in order for
experimenters to monitor eye movement and brain activity
From the study by Dement amp Kleitman what does an electroencephalogram (EEG) record (2)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Outline one problem with using an EEG to investigate dreaming (2)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Electro-encephalogram (EEG)
Electro-oculogram(EOG)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 6
Procedure for Hypothesis 1
Procedure for Hypothesis 2
Procedure for Hypothesis 3
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 5
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Draw a line to correct part of diagram to show where electrodes were attached in order for
experimenters to monitor eye movement and brain activity
From the study by Dement amp Kleitman what does an electroencephalogram (EEG) record (2)
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Outline one problem with using an EEG to investigate dreaming (2)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Electro-encephalogram (EEG)
Electro-oculogram(EOG)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 6
Procedure for Hypothesis 1
Procedure for Hypothesis 2
Procedure for Hypothesis 3
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 6
Procedure for Hypothesis 1
Procedure for Hypothesis 2
Procedure for Hypothesis 3
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 7
Dement amp Kleitman had 3 hypotheses
Findings Conclusion
Hypothesis
1
Hypothesis
2
Hypothesis
3
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 8
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 9
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 Identify one of the aims of the study by Dement amp Kleitman [2 Marks]
2 Give two measures that the researchers obtained while their subjects were sleeping [2 Marks]
3 Outline the sample used in the study [2 Marks]
4 Explain one problem with this sample [2 Marks]
5 From the study by Dement amp Kleitman on sleep give fourcharacteristics of REM sleep [4 Marks]
6 In the study on sleep and dreaming by Dement andKleitman it is suggested that Rapid Eye Movements
(REM)only occur during dreaming Give one piece of evidencewhich supports this suggestion and one
piece of evidence that challenges it [4 Marks]
7 Dement and Kleitman point out that dream recall fromNREM was higher if the awakening occurred within
eight minutes of the end of REM than if the awaking occurredlater How did they explain this difference
[2 Marks]
8 Outline another possible explanation for this difference [2marks ]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) State a suitable hypothesis for the study by Dement and Kletiman (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Dement and Kleitman (2)
c) Describe the measures of sleep used in this study (2)
d) Explain how the validity of these measurements could be assessed (6)
e) Outline the conclusions of this study (8)
f) Suggest two changes to this study and outline how these changes might affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 10
Make a connection between sea
horses and the hippocampi
What is the hippocampus Where is it in the brain What does the hippocampus do
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 11
Previous research on the role of the hippocampus
Other evidence to suggest the hippocampus is important for navigational memory
1 Animals that have a large territory have a large hippocampus
2 Small mammals and birds who engage in lots of food storage have a large hippocampus
3 Racing pigeons renowned for their skill at flying home long distances from unknown
locations have a large hippocampus (compared to other breeds of pigeon)
Aim
Participants
Research Method and Design (remember what they are and the difference between them)
The role of the hippocampus on our memory - evidence from human Ps using page 68 of your
textbooks answer the following questions
1) Why did HM have surgery
2) What part of the brain was removed
3) What impact did this have on his memory
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 12
Independent variables and dependent variables
Procedure (include info on pixel counting and VBM)
Controls ndash (variables kept the same in each condition)
Results
Difference between taxi-drivers and non-taxi-drivers
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 13
Results continued
Correlational results
Conclusions
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 14
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 15
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 a) Explain why Maguire et al used taxi drivers in their study of spatial memory
(2)
b) Identify two criteria used to select the taxi drivers as participants in this study
(2)
2 a) Describe one finding from this study (2)
b) Suggest how the findings from this study might be used
(2)
3 Outline two major ideas of the biological approach to psychology that are in this study
(4)
4 Outline one control that was used in the study of brain scans by Maguire et al and
explain why it was important to use this control
(4)
5 The study by Maguire et al used the biological technique of brain scanning
Describe one commonly used brain scanning technique
Suggest one reason why results gained from such biological scanning techniques should be
treated with caution
(2)
6
a)
In the study by Maguire et al describe one method used to analyse the brain scans
(2)
b) Describe one result obtained using this method
(2)
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Maguire et al (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Maguire et al and give one limitation of the
sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Maguire et al (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Maguire et al and suggest how it
could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Maguire et al (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Maguire et al and outline how these changes might
affect the results
(8)
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 16
TASK 1 Using page 84 of your textbook label the diagram below using the following terms
right optic nerve corpus callosum right half of visual field
right retina left optic nerve Left retina
left half of visual field
TASK 2 Label the hemisphere (R or L) that you think the following capabilities belong to
Speech Spatial skill Drawing
Non-verbal Language Language comprehension
Mathematics Writing
What is the corpus callosum and what does it do
What is a commisurotomy
What would happen if the corpus callosum is severed
(cut)
Left Hemisphere Right Hemisphere
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 17
Who were the participants in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Describe the research method used in the Dement and Kleitman study
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
TASK Label the apparatus diagram with as much detail as possible to represent the procedure and
techniques used by Sperry Use page 86 of the textbook to help you
Procedure
Sperry used a number of different tasks with his participants to test the abilities of their
separated hemispheres
Tasks involving both visual hemisperes
Tasks involving only one visual field
Tactile tasks
Hand pose test
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 18
Findings
Test conditions
Findings
The word
Key projected to left visual field
Case projected to right visual field
Asked what they had seen stated
Participants then had to search amongst different
objects with Left hand to find the bdquokey‟ they picked
out
Right hand
A picture
$ shown to Left visual field
pound shown to right visual field
Asked to draw
what seen with left hand drew
what seen with right hand drew
Object is put into Ps hands (out of sight)
Object put into Ps right hand could they name them
Object put into Ps left hand could they name them
bdquohandpose test‟
Participants palms are facing upwards (out of
sight) the researcher touches one finger
Ps are then asked to use the thumb (that was on the
hand not touched) to touch the finger touched by the
experimenter could they do it
Give one piece of evidence that illustrates the
language limitations of the right hemisphere of
the brain amp a piece of evidence that the right
hemisphere is not completely word blind
Language limitation
Right hemisphere not completely word blind
What was found in tasks requiring parallel
response
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 19
Evaluation Issues to consider ndash ethics method sample design procedure reliability and validity
STRENGTHS
WEAKNESSES
Conclusions
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 20
Suggest how your chosen study could be improved (8)
Outline the implications of the improvements you have suggested for your
chosen study (8)
What changes would you make What would the effect of the changes be
Note ndash you need to write enough in each column for 8 marks
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 21
SECTION A QUESTIONS
1 (a) In the study by Sperry what is meant by the term ldquosplit brainrdquo [2]
(b) Explain one problem with making generalisations about normal brain activity from a study of
people with split brains [2]
2 (a) What technique did Sperry use to present information to only one side of the brain [2]
(b) Why does this technique not present a problem to people with ldquonormalrdquo brains [2]
3 From the paper by Sperry on split brain patients outline the evidence which indicates that
language is processed in the left hemisphere of the brain [4]
4 In the paper by Sperry on split brain patients he writes ldquothe second hemisphere does not know
what the first hemisphere has been doingrdquo
(a) Give one piece of evidence to support this statement [2]
(b) Explain why this problem does not matter in the everyday activity of the patients in this study
[2]
5 (a) In the study by Sperry why did the patients have their brains cut in two [2]
(b) How were they able to adapt in most everyday situations [2]
6 (a) From the study by Sperry outline the major function of the corpus collosum [2]
(b) Sperry suggested that we effectively have two minds Outline one piece of evidence from the
study that shows this [2]
SECTION B QUESTIONS
a) Identify the aim of the study by Sperry (2)
b) Describe the sample used in the study by Sperry and give one
limitation of the sample
(6)
c) Describe how behaviour was tested in the study by Sperry (6)
d) Describe one of the ethical issues raised in the study by Sperry
and suggest how it could be dealt with
(6)
e) Outline the conclusions of the study by Sperry (8)
f) Suggest two changes to the study by Sperry and outline how
these changes might affect the results
(8)
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
Key Debate - Reductionism
If something is reductionist it means it uses the simplest explanation to describe complex behaviour
To understand fully what it means complete the word gap exercise below
TASK 1 Fill in the gaps below using the words provided in the box
Reductionism is the way in which ____________ often explain ______________ psychological
phenomena by reducing them to a much ____________level often focusing on a ___________
factor Most research is _________________ to an extent as most ______________ studies
choose to examine the influence of single factors on complex ________________
Problems associated with reductionist explanations include
they make complex behaviours seem very ________________
some of the bdquo____________ level‟ explanations (__________ rather than physiological for
example) may be more interesting and more ___________
reductionism can detract from the study of the bdquowhole‟ person or animal
Strengths of reductionism are
reductionism makes concepts ___________ to test
it is _________________ amp tends to use the scientific method of ________________
laboratory experiments which are ________________
if we reduce explanations to their most basic level we are less likely to use ______________
and possibly inaccurate explanations
NOTE Then issue of reductionism does not just apply to the physiological approach What
other approaches do you think it applies to
single behaviours simpler easier
experimental complex useful psychologists
subjective reductionist controlled social
scientific higher simplistic replicable
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 23
In the Core Studies exam you could be asked a question on the Physiological Approachin
Psychology The question could look something like this-
a) Outline one assumption of the physiological approach in psychology (2)
b) Describe how the physiological approach could explainhellip (4)
c) Describeone similarityand one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
d) Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using any examples
from physiological approach studies (12)
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains dreaming (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains the lateralisation of brain function (4)
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
b)Describe how the physiological approach explains spatial memory (4)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 24
Describe one similarity and one difference between any two physiological studies (6)
Similarities Differences
Now have a go at answering the questionhellip
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 25
Discussstrengths and weaknesses of the physiological approach using examples
from anyphysiological approach studies (12)
Point Example Comment
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 26
DEMENT AND KLEITMAN
Aim To determine the relationship between eye-movements and dreaming during sleep Dement and Kleitman
wanted to answer 3 questions
Will people be more likely to report dreams during REM sleep than non-REM sleep
Can people accurately estimate the length of their dreams
Are eye-movements related to dream content
Method Correlation in a laboratory
Participants 7 adult males and 2 adult females
Procedure Participants were asked not to consume caffeine or alcohol during the day preceeding the
experiment They arrived at the sleep laboratory in time for their normal bed time
Electrodes were placed on the scalp to measure brain activity and near the eyes to measure eye movement The
participants then went to a quiet dark room to go to sleep
At various times during the night the participant was woken by a doorbell and asked to recall their dream if
they had been dreaming and they were also asked about the length of their dream They spoke into a tape
recorder
Results
1 Participants were much more likely to recall dreams when they were woken during REM sleep than during
non-REM sleep
2 Participants were accurate in their estimation of dream length One participant was responsible for a large
number of the errors made when estimating dream length
3 Eye movement seemed to be related to dream content eg someone whose eye-movements had been mainly
horizontal had been dreaming about people throwing tomatoes at each other whereas someone whose eye-
movements had been mainly vertical had been dreaming about watching someone climb a ladder
Conclusions People do recall dreams better during REM Where people recall dreams during non-REM they are
probably remembering the dream they had during their last period of REM sleep People can usually estimate
the length of their dreams quite accurately and eye-movements are related to dream content
Strengths
Quantitative and qualitative data was gathered
Gave an objective way to measure dreams for the first time
Promoted further research into sleep and dreaming
High levels of control over variables
Weaknesses
Small number of participants only 5 of whom were studied intensively
Low ecological validity as people do not usually have electrodes attached to them nor are they
frequently woken up during their dreams
It could be argued that they tested dream recall rather than actual dreams so people might dream
during non-REM sleep but only recall them during REM sleep
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 27
MAGUIRE
Aim The study attempts to determine whether changes could be detected in the brains of humans
who have extreme experience of spatial navigation
Method Quasi- experiment
Participants Sixteen male licensed cab drivers who had passed bdquothe knowledge‟ All were right
handed and were aged between 32 and 62 with a mean age of 44 They had all been licensed at least
18 months although the range was from 18 months to 42 years with a mean 143 years The control
group consisted of scans selected from a database All of the control group were healthy right
handed males aged between 32 and 62 None of the control group were cab drivers
Procedure The brains of the taxi drivers were scanned using an MRI (magnetic resonance imaging)
scan The volume of the hippocampus was measured using voxel based morphology (3 dimensions) and
pixel counting (2 dimensions) and was compared to that of 50 brain scans of male right-handed non
taxi drivers
Results
Using the VBM (voxel based morphology) showed that the brains of cab drivers showed
significantly increased grey matter volume in the right and left posterior hippocampi
The control group had relatively greater grey matter volume in the anterior hippocampi
relative to the cab drivers
No other differences were found between the brains of the two groups
The pixel counting technique showed that there was no significant difference in the overall
volume of the hippocampi between the cab drivers and the control group but did confirm the
regional differences described above
The volume of the right posterior hippocampus showed a positive correlation with the length
of time as a cab driver the results were reversed when looking at the anterior hippocampus
Conclusions
The results how that experience can affect the volume of structures of the brain
Strengths
MRI scans give a detailed view of the brain and are safe and painless
Applying these results to a broader context shows that the brain changes in response to
experience
The choice of cab drivers as a sample was good as they are a discrete group of people with
specific knowledge and experience
The data collected was quantitative and collected using precise equipment so there is unlikely
to be any bias
Weaknesses
Problems with interpreting MRI scans
You can‟t use MRI scans on people with pace makers and unsuitable for people with
claustrophobia
The results cannot be generalised to left handed taxi drivers male or female
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
AS Psychology ndash Physiological Approach
Page 28
SPERRY
Aim To investigate the hemispheric functioning of split brain patients
Method Quasi-experiment
Participants 11 individuals who had their corpus callosum severed (commisurectomies) to treat
severe epilepsy Two of these (one male and one female) were studied in detail
Procedure Information was presented to one hemisphere by presenting it to only one visual field
Their hands were screened from them so they cannot see objects placed in front of them ie an
object shown to the right visual field or placed in the right hand will only be perceived by the left
hemisphere
Results
Information shown to only one hemisphere will only be recalled if shown to the same
hemisphere again
Visual material shown to the left hemisphere (right visual field) can be described in speech
and writing If it is shown to the right hemisphere (left visual field) participants will deny
seeing anything but they are able to pick out the correct object with their left hand
If two different figures are shown to the hemispheres then the participant will be able to
draw what they have seen in the left visual field with their left hand (right hemisphere)
However if asked what they have drawn they will tell you the object they saw in the right
visual field (left hemisphere)
An object placed in the right hand (left hemisphere) can be described and named An object
placed in the left hand (right hemisphere) cannot be described or named but can be selected
from other objects
Objects can only be selected again by the hand in which they were originally placed The left
hand will ignore objects that the right hand is looking for and vice versa As Sperry
commented it is like two different people are completing the same task
Conclusions
There is some lateralisation of function between the hemispheres
Strengths
High levels of control
Clearly demonstrated the lateralisation of function between the left and right hemisphere
Ethical
Although it was a small sample it was probably representative of the people who have had this
operation
Weaknesses
The tasks are low in ecological validity- the problems participants faced in the task would
probably not be a problem in real life
It may not be possible to compare the brains of severe epileptics who have undergone brain
surgery to the brains of bdquonormal‟ people
There were only 11 participants which is a small sample to generalise from
top related